| submitted | available | document details (if available) | source link |
|---|---|---|---|
| December 01 2009 | 2008 Dodge LC22 Challenger SRT8 1st Edition CVISION Technologies |
| various | User Manual | Users Manual | 2.76 MiB | December 01 2009 |
62713 08 DodgeChallenger.qxd:62713cov 12/20/07 2:42 PM Page 1 2 0 0 8 C h a l l e n g e r S R T 8 2 0 0 8 O W N E R S M A N U A L Challenger SRT8 81-226-0821 First Edition Printed in U.S.A. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured. Copyright 2007 Chrysler LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 INTRODUCTION . 3 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . 9 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . 71 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . 145 STARTING AND OPERATING . 211 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . 279 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . 293 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . 345 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . 351 10 INDEX . 361 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 INTRODUCTION 1 CONTENTS m Introduction . 4 m How To Use This Manual . 4 m Warnings And Cautions . 6 m Vehicle Identification Number . 6 m Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . 7 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owners Manual. 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION This Owners Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer-oriented documents. You are urged to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings. When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPARt parts, and is inter-
ested in your satisfaction. INTRODUCTION 5 1 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title. NOTE:
It is illegal to remove the VIN. VIN Location VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death. INTRODUCTION 7 1 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 2 m A Word About Your Keys . 12 N Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
. 12 N FOB With Integrated Key . 13 N Ignition Key Removal
. 14 N Key-In-Ignition Reminder
. 15 m Sentry Keyt . 15 N Replacement Keys . 16 N Customer Key Programming . 17 N General Information . 18 m Security Alarm System . 18 N Rearming Of The System . 18 N To Arm The System . 19 N To Disarm The System . 19 m Illuminated Entry System . 20 m Remote Keyless Entry . 21 N To Unlock The Doors
. 21 N To Lock The Doors . 23 N Express Down Window Feature . 24 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE N To Open The Trunk . 25 N Using The Panic Alarm . 25 N Programming Additional Transmitters . 25 N Transmitter Battery Service . 25 N General Information . 26 m Remote Starting System . 27
. 27 m Door Locks . 29 N Manual Door Locks . 29 N Power Door Locks
. 30
. 33 N Power Windows . 33 N Wind Buffeting . 34 N How To Use Remote Start m Windows m Trunk Lock And Release . 35 m Trunk Safety Warning . 36 N Trunk Emergency Release . 36 m Occupant Restraints . 37 N Lap/Shoulder Belts . 38 N Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . 42 N Seat Belt Pretensioners . 43 N Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlertt)
. 43 N Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped . 44 N Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . 45 N Seat Belt Extender . 45 N Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . 46 N Event Data Recorder (EDR)
. 56 N Child Restraint . 58 m Engine Break-In Recommendations . 67 m Safety Tips
. 68 N Transporting Passengers
. 68 N Lock Your Vehicle . 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 N Exhaust Gas . 68 N Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
. 69 N Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . 70 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with an integral ignition switch. You can insert the double-sided integrated key into the ignition switch with either side up. Keyless Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Go feature, refer to Section 5 of this manual for more information. Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of which are detented and one spring-loaded. The de-
tented positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the detented ON position. 1 LOCK 2 ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START Fob With Integrated Key The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the Fob. The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead. The valet key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking. To remove the valet key from the Fob, slide the mechani-
cal latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other hand. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 2 Valet Key Removal NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up. 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ignition Key Removal Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key. NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out-
lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit, under Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features), under Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4. WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Dont leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Key-In-Ignition Reminder If you open the drivers door and the key is in the ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key. The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds NOTE:
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position. SENTRY KEYT The Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni-
tion Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to operate the ignition switch. After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
viced as soon as possible. 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE:
The Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System is not compat-
ible with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. Exxon/Mobil Speedpass, additional RKE transmit-
ters, or any other transponder-equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the trans-
mitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interfer-
ence with this system. All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Replacement Keys NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a transmitter is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans-
mitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per-
formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electron-
ics. A blank transmitter is one that has never been programmed. NOTE: When having the Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with you to the authorized dealer. Customer Key Programming If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated keys, you can program new transmitters to the system by performing the following steps:
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key. 2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key. 3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing, turn on again for three seconds, and then turn off. The new integrated key is programmed. The RKE trans-
mitter will also be programmed during this procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte-
grated key, contact your authorized dealer for details. 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized NOTE:
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro-
grammed. General Information The Sentry Keyt system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM The Vehicle Security Alarm System monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lights will flash; and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will flash. Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the system will turn the horn off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes, and then the system will rearm itself. To Arm The System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is closed, or if all doors are closed, the system will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm Indicator Light will flash. If it does not illuminate, the system is not arming. In addition, if you open a door during the arming period, the system will cancel the arming process. If you wish to rearm the system after closing the door, you must repeat one of the previously-described arming sequences. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position. NOTE:
The drivers door key cylinder and the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the system. The system remains armed during trunk entry. Press-
ing the TRUNK button will not disarm the system. If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the alarm will sound. When the system is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The Vehicle Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously-described arming sequences has occurred, the system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the system. If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system. Tamper Alert If something has triggered the system in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you disarm the system. Check the vehicle for tampering. ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position. NOTE:
None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position (extreme downward position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are turned on manually. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to about 35 ft (11 m) using a hand-held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the NOTE:
ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter;
however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all transmitter buttons for all fobs. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 2 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the drivers door, or twice within five seconds, to unlock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the drivers door or both doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter. Refer to Remote Key Unlock, under Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features), under Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) in Section 4. When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button. 2. Release both buttons at the same time. 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed. 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock, under 9Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features), under Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in Sec-
tion 4. When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button. 2. Release both buttons at the same time. 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed. 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock, under Per-
sonal Settings (Customer Programmable Features), un-
der Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4. To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock, under Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features), under Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC) in Section 4. When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button. 2. Release both buttons at the same time. 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed. 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm. Express Down Window Feature This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely. To Open The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the transmitter two times within five seconds to open the trunk. Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on. The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater. NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system. 2 Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Keyt, Customer Key Programming. If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details. Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery. NOTE:
Perchlorate Material special handling may apply. Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate housing or the printed circuit board. 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door. 1 Battery Access Door 2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. 3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years. 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios. REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a targeted range of 328 ft (100 m). NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:
Shift lever in PARK Doors closed Hood closed Trunk closed Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level, and RKE PANIC button not pressed. 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Enter Remote Start Mode Remote Start mode. Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn will honk twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle. NOTE:
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if so equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position. NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON position in For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the message Insert Key/
Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert the key. Once inserted, the message Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run. order to drive the vehicle. To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button one time. NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request. DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 2 Door Lock Plunger If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death. Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Dont leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition, and any door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the key in the vehicle. Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, the key is in the ignition, and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key. Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2. The transmission is in gear 3. All doors are closed 4. The throttle is pressed 5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h), and 6. The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for programming. Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) 3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4. The driver door is opened 5. The doors were not previously unlocked, and 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h). 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled. Refer to Unlock Doors Automati-
cally on Exit, under Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features), under Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) in Section 4. When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors. 2. Place the key in the ignition switch. 3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position. However, do not start the engine. 4. Within 30 seconds, depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors. 5. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming. If you do not hear the chime, it means that the NOTE:
system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure. 6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws. WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the drivers door control both of the door windows. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 There is a single window control on the passengers door trim panel that operates the window on the passengers door. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. NOTE: The door window will lower slightly if it is closed completely when opening the door. The window will return to its fully closed position after closing the door. This action allows the door to open without resis-
tance and prevents window and top seal damage. NOTE: You can remotely lower both the driver side and passenger side windows at the same time. Refer to Remote Keyless Entry/Express Down Window Feature in this section. 2 Power Window Switches 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. AUTO-Down Feature The drivers door power window switch and passenger door power window switch on some models have an AUTO-
down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To open the window part way, press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. The power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit, under Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features), under Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with one window open, then open the other window to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to mini-
mize the buffeting. TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the switch will operate. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds. With the ignition switch in the ON position, the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed. With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or the key removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym-
bol will display until the trunk is closed. 2 Trunk Release Button 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE TRUNK SAFETY WARNING Trunk Emergency Release WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid, near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk. OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, the front airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and the supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. 2 Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out. WARNING!
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are not equipped with seats and seat belts. belt properly. designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 2 Latch Plate 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Latch Plate To Buckle WARNING!
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces wont be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug. A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt. 2 Removing Slack From Belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing. Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision. These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). (Refer to information on Air-
bags in this section). Like the front airbags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlertT) If the drivers seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlertt) will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlertt will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the drivers seat belt is buckled. The BeltAlertt will be reactivated if the drivers seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). BeltAlertt Programming The BeltAlertt can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlertt. 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START, buckle the drivers seat belt. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step. NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the drivers seat belt at least three times, ending with the seat belt buckled. NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract the seat belt. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming. The BeltAlertt can be reactivated by repeating this pro-
cedure. NOTE: When the BeltAlertt is deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the drivers seat belt is unbuckled. Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt. Use The Automatic Locking mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emer-
gency) locking mode. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it. 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are em-
bossed on the airbag covers. Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tion. Remove and store the extender when not needed. Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver side front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger side front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the 1 Airbags 2 Knee Bolsters NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment. The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity. WARNING!
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to open them. You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional. These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating. Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc. any way. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 This vehicle is also equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags (located above the side windows) to protect the driver and passenger sitting next to a window. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG. 2 Side Window Airbag NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment. 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions. Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the curtain airbags. Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side curtain airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions, the front airbags will deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions. The supplemental side curtain airbag on the crash side of the vehicle will also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions. How-
ever, even in collisions where the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you properly. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag. 1. Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck-
led up in the rear seat. WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position. 2. Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. (Refer to information on Child Restraint in this section.) 3. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buck-
led up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 4. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to information on Child Restraint in this section.) 5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 6. All occupants should use their seat belts properly. 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate. 8. Do not lean against the door, as the airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door. 9. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the 9If You Need Customer Assistance9 section. 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the airbags wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags. Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-
ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. This vehicle has supplemental side curtain air-
bags, and they need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Side Remote Acceleration Sensors Side Door Pressure Sensors Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win-
Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Seat Belt Reminder Light dows Knee Impact Bolsters Front Acceleration Sensors Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How the Airbag System Works The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not detect rollover. The ORC also determines if a side impact is severe enough to deploy the supplemental side curtain airbag as required for each type of impact. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position. These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster, the instru-
ment panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and they will not inflate. The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for six to eight seconds as a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu-
ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start-up. 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you wont have the airbags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right away. The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli-
sion severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The driver front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every-
one for the best interaction with the front airbag. The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates. This espe-
cially applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated. If a Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC detects a moderate-to-severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system. This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system. If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur:
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you havent healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instruc-
tions for cleaning. It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING!
Deployed airbags cannot protect you in another col-
lision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment, with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following func-
tions:
Cuts off fuel to the engine. Flashes hazard lights. Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed. Unlocks the doors automatically. NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven. Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame. You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster. It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 NOTE: Perchlorate Material special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in an impact. While the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON. The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight The light flickers or comes on and remains on while second interval. driving. 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Event Data Recorder (EDR) In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data during and/or after airbag deploy-
ment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable. NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment. 2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be recorded (e.g., loss of battery power). In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations. In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-
tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request. General data that does not identify par-
ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo-
ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-
tained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-
dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved, 2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product, 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant, or 4. Otherwise required by law. Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for electronically-controlled safety systems, including the airbag system Airbag disable light status (if equipped) 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 cycles and vehicle mileage) 9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition Airbag deployment level (if applicable) Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status (service and parking brakes) Accelerator status (including vehicle speed) Engine control status (including engine speed) Transmission gear selection Cruise control status Traction/stability control status Tire Pressure Monitoring System status (if equipped) 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the childs size. experts recommend that There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owners Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child. Infants and Child Restraints Safety children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) in this section. Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position. Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older than one year. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) in this section. The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit the vehicles seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the childs back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt. 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug Check belt fit periodically. A childs squirming or If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. slouching can move the belt out of position. as possible. NOTE:
www.seatcheck.org or call 1866SEATCHECK. information, additional For refer to WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturers directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint. A rearward-facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant. Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint:
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it. The restraint must be appropriate for your childs weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits. Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it. Buckle the child into the seat according to the child When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. restraint manufacturers directions. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) Your vehicles rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicles seat belts, instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicles seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle. All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats. You should NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehi-
cles seat belts. LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturers directions carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system. The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window. These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it. Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturers instructions. 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE:
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle. WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed. Refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section. A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten web-
bing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by de-
pressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 2 In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out. If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position. 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint. Tether Strap Mounting 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. 3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturers instruc-
tions. NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-
conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended viscosity and quality grades is shown in Section 7. 2 CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered as a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Lock Your Vehicle Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a well-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed. Exhaust Gas WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
(CO) follow these safety tips. Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. If you are required to drive with the trunk open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle 2 Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt. 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer. Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 3 m Mirrors . 75 N Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror . 75 N Outside Mirrors . 75 N Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped . 76 N Power Remote Control Mirrors . 76 N Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped . 77 N Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped . 77 m Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) If Equipped . 78 N Operation . 80 N Phone Call Features
. 87 N UConnectt System Features . 89 N Advanced Phone Connectivity . 94 N Things You Should Know About Your UConnectt System . 96 N General Information . 104 72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE m Voice Recognition System If Equipped . 104 N Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . 104 N Commands . 105 N Voice Training . 108 m Seats . 109 N Easy Entry Seats . 109 N Power Seats . 109 N Front Seat Back Recline . 110 N Lumbar Support . 111 N Head Restraints
. 111 N Heated Seats
. 112 N Folding Rear Seat If Equipped . 113 m To Open And Close The Hood . 114 m Lights . 116 N Headlight Switch . 116 N Automatic Headlights If Equipped . 117 N Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only) . 117 N Headlight Time Delay . 117 N Daytime Running Lights If Equipped . 118 N Lights-On Reminder . 118 N Fog Lights . 118 N Multifunction Control Lever . 119 N Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . 120 N Interior Lights
. 121 m Windshield Wipers And Washers . 122 N Intermittent Wiper System . 122 N Mist Feature . 123 N Windshield Washers . 123 N Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Auto Headlights Only) . 124 N Adding Washer Fluid . 124 m Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . 125 m Electronic Speed Control . 126 N Electronic Speed Control Operation . 126 N To Activate . 127 N To Set At A Desired Speed . 127 N To Deactivate . 127 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73 N To Resume Speed . 128 N To Vary The Speed Setting . 128 N To Accelerate For Passing . 128 m Overhead Console . 129 N Courtesy/Reading Lights . 129 N Sunglasses Storage . 130 m Garage Door Opener If Equipped . 130 N Programming HomeLinkt . 131 N Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . 134 N Using HomeLinkt . 134 N Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkt Button . 135 N Security . 135 3 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE N Troubleshooting Tips . 135 N General Information . 136 m Power Sunroof If Equipped . 136 N Opening Sunroof - Manually . 137 N Opening Sunroof - Express
. 137 N Closing Sunroof - Manually . 137 N Closing Sunroof - Express . 138 N Pinch Protect Feature . 138 N Pinch Protect Override . 138 N Venting Sunroof - Express . 138 N Sunshade Operation . 139 N Wind Buffeting . 139 N Sunroof Maintenance . 139 N Ignition Off Operation . 139 N Sunroof Fully Closed . 139 m Electrical Power Outlets . 140 N Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . 141 m Cupholders . 142 N Front Cupholders . 142 N Rear Cupholders . 142 m Console Features . 143 N Sliding Center Console Armrest
. 143 N Console Storage . 143 m Rear Window Features . 144 N Rear Window Defroster . 144 MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. 3 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. NOTE: The passenger-side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle. Automatic Dimming Mirror 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger-side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger-side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger-side convex mirror. Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions, full forward, full rearward, and normal. Power Remote Control Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position. After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light. 3 Power Mirror Control Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the Electric Rear Window Defroster. Illuminated Vanity Mirror 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnectT) IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The sales code RER, REN and REU radios contain an integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) system. Refer to your Navigation Users Manual for UConnectt system operating instructions for these radios. UConnectt is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle com-
munications system. UConnectt allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands (e.g., 9Call { Mike {Work9 or 9Dial {
248-555-12129). Your cellular phones audio is transmitted through your vehicles audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnectt system. NOTE: The UConnectt system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetootht 9Hands-Free Profile,9 Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the UConnectt website for supported phones. the For UConnectt customer support, visit NOTE:
following websites:
www.chrysler.com/uconnect www.dodge.com/uconnect www.jeep.com/uconnect or call 18778558400 UConnectt allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the systems microphone for private conversation. The UConnectt phonebook enables you to store up to 32 names, with four numbers per name. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. This system is driven through your Bluetootht Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnectt features Bluetootht technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnectt works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicles UConnectt system. The UConnectt system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or French languages. Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system (depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped), and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button) that will enable you to access the system. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio. The individual buttons are described in the Operation section. The UConnectt system can be used with any Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetootht cellular phone. See the UConnectt website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnectt features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details. The UConnectt system is fully integrated with the vehi-
cles audio system. The volume of the UConnectt system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped. 3 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnectt system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on certain radios. Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnectt system and to navigate through the UConnectt menu structure. Voice commands are required after most UConnectt system prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options. Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt or another prompt. For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then 9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9 For each feature explanation in this section, only the combined form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands:
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the UConnectt system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you. Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section. Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following the beep. The UConnectt system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help. To activate the UConnectt system from idle, simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions. All UConnectt system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head. Cancel Command At any prompt, after the beep, you can say 9Cancel9 and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu. Pair (Link) UConnectt System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnectt system, you must pair your compatible Bluetootht enabled cellular phone. To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owners Manual. The UConnectt website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 9Setup Phone Pairing.9 follow the audible prompts. The following are general phone to UConnectt system pairing instructions:
Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say When prompted, after the beep, say 9Pair a Phone9 and You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process. For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the UConnectt system a name for your cellular phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name. 3 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7, with 1 being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnectt system. However, at any given time, only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to your UConnectt system. The priority allows the UConnectt system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnectt system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone Connectivity9 in this section). Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say 9Dial.9 want to call. The system will prompt you to say the number you For example, you can say 9234-567-8901.9 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination. Based on the country in which the ve-
hicle was purchased, the UConnectt system limits the user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers. For example, in the U.S., 234-567-890 is nine digits long, which is not a valid U.S. phone number - the closest valid phone number has 10 digits. The UConnectt system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios. Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say Call.9 person you want to call. The system will prompt you to say the name of the After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnectt phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to 9Add Names to Your UConnectt Phonebook,9 in this section. The UConnectt system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios. Add Names to Your UConnectt Phonebook NOTE: Adding names to the phonebook is recom-
mended when the vehicle is not in motion. Press the PHONE button to begin. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 9Phonebook New Entry.9 After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or 9Robert9 instead of 9Bob.9 When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., 9Home,9 9Work,9 9Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired. When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding. After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu. 3 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The UConnectt system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. Phonebook Download UConnectt allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetootht. To use this feature, press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download. The system prompts, Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetootht The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetootht Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone. NOTE:
The phone handset must support Bluetootht OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature. Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetootht, and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetootht link is busy. In this case, the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetootht connection to the UConnectt system, and then send the address book entry via Bluetootht. Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetootht connection. If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it will only use the first 24 characters. Edit Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook NOTE: Editing names in the phonebook is recom-
mended when the vehicle is not in motion. Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say 9Phonebook Edit.9 entry that you wish to edit. You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook Next, choose the number designation (home, work, When prompted, recite the new phone number for the mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit. phonebook entry that you are editing. After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu. 9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add John Does work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9 feature. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 9Phonebook Delete.9 Delete Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries from the list, press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnectt system is playing the desired entry and say 9Delete.9 3 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE After you enter the name, the UConnectt system will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you wish to delete. Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted. 9Phonebook Erase All.9 Delete All Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say The UConnectt system will ask you to verify that you After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be Note that only the phonebook in the current language wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. deleted. is deleted. 9Phonebook List Names.9 List All Names in the UConnectt Phonebook Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say The UConnectt system will play the names of all the To call one of the names in the list, press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name, and say 9Call.9 phonebook entries. NOTE: The user can also exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9 operations at this point. The UConnectt system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call. The selected number will be dialed. Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnectt system if the feature(s) are available on your cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the UConnectt system. Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have. Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the UConnectt system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected. 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone. Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The UConnectt system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it. Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call, press the Voice Recognition button and say 9Dial9 or 9Call9 followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to 9Toggling Between Calls9 in this section. To combine two calls, refer to 9Conference Call9 in this section. 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep. Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one time. Conference Call When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call. Three-Way Calling To initiate three-way calling, press the Voice Recogni-
tion button while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as described under 9Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call has established, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call. Call Termination To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep. Redial Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say The UConnectt system will call the last number that 9Redial.9 was dialed from your cellular phone. NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnectt system. Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnectt system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the UConnectt system either until the call UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnectt system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone. After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the UConnectt system for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnectt system to the mobile phone. An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF. UConnectT System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnectt system is using:
Press the PHONE button to begin. 3 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to English, Espanol, or Francais. Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection. After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language. NOTE: After every UConnectt language change opera-
tion, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific and usable across all languages. Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable:
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area. If the phone is not reachable and the UConnectt system is operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:
Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say 9Emergency9 and the UConnectt system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico. NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area. The UConnectt system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly. Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnectt system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations, when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnectt system. Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance:
Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say 9Towing Assistance.9 NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance cover-
age details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24Hour Towing Assistance Card. 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Paging To learn how to page, refer to 9Working with Automated Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnectt system. Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working with Automated Systems.9 Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system. You can use your UConnectt system to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnectt system. 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When calling a number with your UConnectt system that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed by the word 9Send.9 For example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the Voice Recognition button and say, 93 7 4 6 # Send.9 Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by 9Send,9 is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen-
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager. You can also send stored UConnectt phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say, Send. The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. The UConnectt system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone. NOTE:
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature. network configurations; this is normal. Barge In - Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear a{,9 you could press the Voice Recognition button and say, 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt. Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnectt sys-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say 9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnectt system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it. Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your cell phone, the UConnectt system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnectt. The status is given for roaming, net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnectt system (while dial-
ing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetootht cellular phone, the audio will be played through your vehicles audio system. The UConnectt system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition. NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnectt system to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio. 3 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off) When you mute the UConnectt system, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the UConnectt system:
Press the Voice Recognition button. Following the beep, say 9Mute.9 In order to un-mute the UConnectt system:
Press the Voice Recognition button. Following the beep, say 9Mute off.9 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnectt system allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnectt system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnectt paired cellular phone to the UConnectt system or vice versa, press the Voice Recog-
nition button and say 9Transfer Call.9 Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnectt System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9 with one electronic device at a time. If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetootht connection between a UConnectt paired cellular phone and the UConnectt system, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your cellular phone Users Manual. List Paired Cellular Phone Names Press the PHONE button to begin. After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Setup Phone Pairing. When prompted, say 9List Phones.9 The UConnectt system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority. To select or delete a paired phone being announced, press the Voice Recogni-
tion button and say Select or Delete. Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone. Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnectt system. Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select. 9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 If The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. the UConnectt system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately within 30 ft [9 m]) the vehicle. the selected phone is not available, 9Setup Phone Pairing.9 Delete UConnectt Paired Cellular Phones Press the PHONE button to begin. After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete. prompts. 3 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Things You Should Know About Your UConnectT System UConnectt Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the PHONE button and say UConnectt Tutorial. Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnectt system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the UConnectt mode (e.g., from radio mode):
Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for five Press the Voice Recognition button and say the seconds until the session begins, or, 9Setup, Voice Training9 command. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnectt system. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched OFF. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts. Voice Recognition (VR) For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 12 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror. Always wait for the beep before speaking. Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you. Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period. Performance is maximized under:
low-to-medium blower setting, low-to-medium vehicle speed, low road noise, smooth road surface, fully closed windows, dry weather condition. Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some. 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 not in motion is recommended. names in the UConnectt phonebook. When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9Send.9 Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is It is not recommended to store similar sounding The UConnectt phonebook nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phonebook. You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported. In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9 compromised with the convertible top down. 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under:
low-to-medium blower setting, low-to-medium vehicle speed, low road noise, smooth road surface, fully closed windows, dry weather conditions, and operation from the drivers seat. Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the UConnectt system. Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. compromised with the convertible top down. Bluetootht Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnectt system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetootht ON mode. Power-Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Commands Alternate(s) Primary zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star (*) plus (+) pound (#) add location all Voice Commands Alternate(s) Primary call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergency English erase all Espanol Francais help home Voice Commands Alternate(s) pairing phone book Primary language list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry no pager pair a phone phone pairing phonebook previous record again redial UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Voice Commands Alternate(s) return or main menu select phone settings or phone set up 3 Primary return to main menu select phone send set up towing assistance transfer call UConnectt Tutorial try again voice training work yes 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration. VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation This Voice Recognition System allows you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder. In a stressful situation, take care to speak into NOTE:
the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively af-
fected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level. WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death. When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command. If you do not say a command within a few NOTE:
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options. If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and say your command. Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is known as barging in. The system will be interrupted and you can add or change commands. This will become helpful once you start to learn the options. NOTE: At any time, you can say the words CANCEL, HELP, or MAIN MENU. These commands are universal and can be used from any menu. All other commands can be used depending upon the active application. For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu. When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume. The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is set to low. 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your commands, you will be prompted to repeat it. To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key and say HELP or MAIN MENU. Commands The Voice Recognition System understands two types of commands. Global commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active. Changing the Volume 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. 2. Say a command (e.g., HELP). 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for VR is different then the audio system. 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu. In this mode, you can say the following commands:
RADIO (to switch to the radio mode) DISC (to switch to the disc mode) MEMO (to switch to the memo recorder) Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave - if equipped) To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
FREQUENCY (to change the frequency) NEXT STATION (to select the next station) PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station) RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu) MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu) Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
FREQUENCY (to change the frequency) NEXT STATION (to select the next station) PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station) RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu) MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu) Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE RADIO. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
CHANNEL NUMBER (to change the channel by its spoken number) nel) NEXT CHANNEL (to select the next channel) PREVIOUS CHANNEL (to select the previous chan-
LIST CHANNEL (to hear a list of available channels) SELECT NAME (to say the name of a channel) RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu) MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu) Disc To switch to the disc mode say DISC. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
TRACK (#) (to change the track) NEXT TRACK (to play the next track) PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track) MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu) 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
NEW MEMO (to record a new memo) During the recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop recording. You continue by saying one of the following commands:
SAVE (to save the memo) CONTINUE (to continue recording) DELETE (to delete the recording) PLAY MEMOS (to play previously recorded memos) During the playback you may press the VR hard-
key to stop playing memos. You continue by saying one of the following commands:
REPEAT (to repeat a memo) NEXT (to play the next memo) 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE PREVIOUS (to play the previous memo) DELETE (to delete a memo) DELETE ALL (to delete all memos) NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR hard-key first and wait for the beep, before speaking the barge in commands. Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnectt system Voice Training feature may be used. 1. Press the VR hard-key, speak System Setup and once you are in that menu then speak Voice Training. This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition. 2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnectt System. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched OFF. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. SEATS Easy Entry Seats Pushing the lever upward (toward the front of the vehicle) allows the seat back to dump forward and the seat to slide forward. This allows for easier access to the rear seat. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Power Seats The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the drivers seat up or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat. 3 Easy Entry Seats Power Seat Switch Front Seat Back Recline To recline:
1. Lean forward in the seat and lift the handle, then lean back to the desired position and release the handle. 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked. CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Recline Lever 2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position. Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever for-
ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise it, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower it, depress the button on the post guide and push downward on the head restraint. 3 Lumbar Support Adjustable Head Restraint 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Seats Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back. The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated. The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel. After turning on the ignition, you can choose from High, Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicators in the top portion of each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicators will illuminate for high, one for low, and none for off. Heated Seat Switch Press the switch once to select high level heating. Press the switch a second time to select low level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut OFF the heating elements. If high level heating is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu-
ous operation. At that time, the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-
tures, especially if used for long periods. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Folding Rear Seat If Equipped The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in use. 3 Rear Folding Seat 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap. WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in an accident. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel. Hood Release Lever Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision. You could have a collision. Be sure the hood latch is fully latched before driving. 3 Hood Safety Catch 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, and fog lights. Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Turn it to the second detent for headlight, park light, and instrument panel light operation. Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO (A) position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch off. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO (A) position. NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode. Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO (A) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled. Refer to Headlights On with Wipers, under Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features), under Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4. Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area. To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned OFF. 3 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If you turn the headlights, park lights, or ignition switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay. If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner. NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature. The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to Delay Turning Headlights Off, under Personal Set-
tings (Customer Programmable Features), under Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4. Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON, the headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving. Lights-On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the drivers door is opened. Fog Lights The front fog light switch is built into the head-
light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either press the headlight switch again or turn off the headlight switch. An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights. Multifunction Control Lever The multifunction control lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. The lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Multifunction Control Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Turn Signals Move the multifunction control lever up or down and the corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. You can also signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent. Releasing the lever at the detent will provide three flashes. If either indicator has a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, see your authorized dealer for service. NOTE: A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a con-
tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to LOW beam. Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction control lever toward you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released. Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent. Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch. Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the head-
light switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the dimmer control upward will in-
crease the brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if so equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets and cupholders. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position. Interior Light Defeat (OFF) Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open. Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on. 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction control lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Windshield Wiper/Washer Control Rotate the end of the multifunction control lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the inter-
mittent settings for high speed wiper operation. CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off. Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion control lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are six delay settings, which allow you to UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Windshield Washers To use the washer, push the multifunction control lever inward (toward the steering column) to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off. 3 regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles. WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. Mist Feature Push the multifunction control lever inward (toward the steering column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever. 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO (A) position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled. Refer to Headlights On with Wipers, under Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features), under Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. Washer Fluid Reservoir The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 3 Tilt Steering Column To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the control handle inward until fully engaged. Electronic Speed Control Operation The speed control lever located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the system. WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). 1 CANCEL 2 RESUME ACCEL 3 ON/OFF 4 SET DECEL To Activate Push and release the ON/OFF button located on the end of the speed control lever. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the speed control sys-
tem is on. To turn the system off, push and release the ON/OFF button again. The system and the indicator light will turn off. WARNING!
Leaving the electronic speed control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you arent using it. 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the lever downward to SET DECEL and release. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE:
Speed control will only function in 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear The speed control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact spare tire. when in the Autostickt mode (if equipped). To Deactivate The system will disable electronic speed control without erasing the memory if you:
Softly tap the brake pedal, Depress the brake pedal, or Pull the speed control lever toward you to CANCEL. 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory. To Resume Speed If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), you can resume the previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set, you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the lever in RESUME ACCEL. When the lever is released, a new set speed will be established. Tapping the lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped speed increases, so tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc. To decrease speed while speed control is set, push down and hold the lever in SET DECEL. Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new set speed will be established. Tapping the lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped, speed decreases. To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Using Speed Control on Hills NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. The automatic transmission will downshift while climb-
ing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so it may be preferable to drive without speed control. WARNING!
Speed control can be dangerous where the system cant maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control. An accident could be the result. Dont use speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery. OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights, an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLinkt), storage for sunglasses, and an optional power sunroof switch. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 3 Courtesy/Reading Lights Overhead Console At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights. Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time to turn off the light. 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent. Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a 9push/push9 design. Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open. Push on the raised bar to close. GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLinkt replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security systems. The HomeLinkt unit operates off your vehicles battery. The HomeLinkt buttons are located in the overhead console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines desig-
nating the different HomeLinkt channels. HomeLinkt Buttons NOTE: HomeLinkt is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active. WARNING!
Programming HomeLinkT UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death. 3 Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLinkt buttons, erase all channels before you begin training. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds. The EVIC will display CLEARING CHAN-
NELS. Release the buttons when the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED. It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLinkt for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) from the HomeLinkt buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view. For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLinkt. 3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen HomeLinkt button and the hand-held transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL #
TRAINING to CHANNEL # TRAINED. Then release both the HomeLinkt and hand-held trans-
mitter buttons. If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter. It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you train. NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator/Canadian Programming section. 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkt button. If the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL # TRANSMIT. If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING repeat Step 3. NOTE: After training a HomeLinkt channel, if the garage door does not operate with HomeLinkt and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System. 5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the learn or training button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door). 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 6. Firmly press and release the learn or training button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed. 7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLinkt button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete. If the device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training. If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Gate Operator/Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLinkt to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor. If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator, replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkt button while you press and release - every two seconds
(cycle) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLinkt has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING to CHANNEL # TRAINED. If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in at this time. Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLinkt earlier in this section. Using HomeLinkT To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLinkt button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkT Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL #
TRAINING. Do not release the button. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLinkt Step 2 and follow all remaining steps. Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED. Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, here are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the original transmitter. Press the learn button on the garage door opener to Did you unplug the device for training, and remember complete the training for rolling code. to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance, please call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the users authority to operate the device. The term IC: before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met. POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console. Power Sunroof Switch WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Opening Sunroof - Manually Press and hold the switch in the rearward position. Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold the switch in the rearward position, the sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving. Opening Sunroof - Express Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called Express Open. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Closing Sunroof - Manually Press and hold the switch in the forward position. Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE the switch in the forward position, the sunroof will close fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving. Closing Sunroof - Express Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called Express Close. During Express Close operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close. Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing, press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position. NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed. Venting Sunroof - Express Press and release the 9V9 button in the center of the switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, which operates regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit, under Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features), under Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4. Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed. 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse. The front 12-volt power outlet has power available only when the ignition is ON. This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit. If desired, the front power outlet can be con-
NOTE:
verted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. Front Power Outlet The center console outlet is powered directly from the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent engine starting. Center Console Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 3 CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicles battery even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicles battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting. Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicles battery. Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage. 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console. Rear Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide conve-
nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows. Front Cupholders Rear Cupholders CONSOLE FEATURES Sliding Center Console Armrest The center console armrest slides forward with three detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use, and shifting ease. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Console Storage The center console has a storage compartment located underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12-volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various size coins). 3 Sliding Console Armrest Center Console 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The pushbutton for the rear window defroster is located on the mode knob of the climate control switch bank. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the electric remote control heated mirrors
(if equipped). An amber light shows that the defroster is on. The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the switch again. To prevent excessive battery drain, use the defroster only when the engine is operat-
ing. CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS m Instrument Panel Features . 148 m Instrument Cluster . 149 m Instrument Cluster Description . 150 m Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
. 159 N Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . 161 N Engine Oil Change Indicator System . 162 N Trip Functions
. 163 N Performance Features
. 165 N Compass Display . 169 N Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) If Equipped . 171 4 N System Warnings
(Customer Information Features)
. 171 N Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)
. 172 m Radio General Information . 175 N Radio Broadcast Signals . 175 N Two Types Of Signals . 175 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL N Electrical Disturbances . 175 N AM Reception . 175 N FM Reception . 175 m Sales Code REQ AM/FM Stereo Radio And 6Disc CD/DVD Changer
. 176
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) N Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . 177 N Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . 184 N Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . 186 N List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . 189 N Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . 189 m Sales Code RER Multimedia System If Equipped . 191 N Operating Instructions Satellite Radio . 192 N Operating Instructions Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) (If Equipped) . 192 N Clock Setting Procedure . 193 m Satellite Radio If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only)
. 195 N System Activation . 195 N Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) . 195 N Selecting Satellite Mode . 196 N Satellite Antenna . 196 N Reception Quality . 197 N Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode . 197 N Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped)
. 199 m Kickert High Performance Sound System With Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) If Equipped . 200 m Remote Sound System Controls . 201 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 m CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . 202 m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . 202 m Climate Controls . 203 N Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System . 203 N Operating Tips . 206 4 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Glove Box 4 Radio 5 Heated Seat Switch 6 ESP OFF Switch 7 Hazard Warning Switch 8 Climate Control 9 Ignition Switch 10 Trunk Release Switch 11 Headlight Switch INSTRUMENT CLUSTER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 4 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1. Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position. 2. Trip Odometer Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings. The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 mi (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it. 3. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed. 4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is on. 5. Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area. 6. Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while driving, turn off some of the vehicles non-essential electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately. 7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check when the ignition switch is turned ON. This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Elec-
tronic Throttle Control system. If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible, place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. In this case, you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing. Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 8. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. 4 CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240F
(116C) or greater, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 230F (93110C). If the pointer remains at 240F
(116C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service. 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. 9. Turn Signal Indicator Light The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. NOTE: A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. NOTE: Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. 10. Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is either not on during starting, or stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 11. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound to warn of an overheated engine condition. When this light turns on, the engine temperature is critically hot. The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as possible. 12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP. 13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light The ESP/BAS warning light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The light should go out with the engine running. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 14. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible. A single chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in Section 7. 15. High Beam Indicator Light This light will turn on when the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam. 4 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 16. Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. A chime will sound if the drivers seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the drivers seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving. 17. Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection. 18. Front Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped This light will turn on when the front fog lights are on. 19. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions exist. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a Check Gascap message will display in the EVIC. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). 20. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a failure. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which could change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated. WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 4 Vehicles equipped with ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). Both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light will turn on in the event of an EBD failure. Immediate repair of the ABS is required in the event of an EBD failure. The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the LOCK position to the ON position. The light should turn on for approxi-
mately two seconds and then turn off. The light will 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake fault is detected. If the parking brake is not applied and the light remains on, or if the light does not turn on, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. NOTE: The light will turn on when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the parking brake is applied. This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 21. Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) Indicator Light If Equipped The VSA Indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is arming, and slowly when the VSA is armed. 22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. CAUTION!
4 The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 23. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the con-
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. 24. Low Fuel Warning Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. 25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) Electronic Vehicle Information Center The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer. Vehicles UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons (de-
scribed in this section) are also equipped with the EVIC. The EVIC consists of the following:
System Status Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays Tire Pressure Monitor System Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) Compass Display Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions UConnectt Hands-Free Communication System Dis-
Navigation System Screens (If Equipped) Audio Mode Display plays (If Equipped) 4 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Selectable Surround [DSS]) Surround Sound Modes (If Equipped with Driver-
Performance Features The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel. MENU Button Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions, Performance Pages, Navigation (If Equipped), System Warnings, System Status, Personal Settings, Telephone (If Equipped), and Sur-
round Sound (If Equipped). FUNCTION SELECT Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote sound system control. Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section. SCROLL Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions, Performance Pages, Navigation (If Equipped), System Status Messages, and Per-
sonal Settings (Customer Programmable Fea-
tures). The SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system control. Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section. AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with compass reading and outside temperature, this screen will display radio and media mode information depending on which radio is in the vehicle. Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following messages:
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi [1.6 km] with either turn signal on) Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime) RKE Battery Low (with a single chime) Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK chime) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 motion) Left/Right Door Ajar Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in Trunk Ajar (with a single chime) Oil Change Required Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime) Channel # Transmit Channel # Training Channel # Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Did Not Train Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime) 4 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime) Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime) Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime) Check TPM System (with a single chime) ESP Off Check Gascap Insert Key/Turn To Run Upshift Stereo (If Equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround Audio Surround (If Equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround Sound [DSS]) 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Braking Distance Sound [DSS]) 1/8 Mile 1/4 Mile Instantaneous G-Force Peak G-Force Digital Speedometer Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine). 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. If the indicator message illuminates when you NOTE:
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty Trip A Trip B Elapsed Time Display Units of Measure in 4 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions. The Trip Functions mode displays the following. Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. Distance To Empty (DTE) Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button. NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. When the DTE value is less than 30 mi (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of 9LOW FUEL.9 This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the 9LOW FUEL9 text and a new DTE value will display. Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset. Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset. Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. Display Units of Measure in To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears. To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed func-
tion (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second window). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Performance Features WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public roadways. It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. 4 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The Performance Features include the following:
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Braking Distance 1/8 Mile 1/4 Mile Instantaneous G-Force Peak G-Force Digital Speedometer To access, press and release the MENU button until Performance Features displays in the EVIC. Press the SCROLL button to cycle through the features. Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature. The following describes each feature and its operation:
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds. 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within 10 seconds. The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h). The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin. Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run time and display the vehicles best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time. To clear the vehicles best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time, press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds. SELECT button is pressed. brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h). Braking Distance When selected, this screen displays the vehicles braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed. This feature will only function when applying the Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature. The word READY will flash when conditions are The distance and speed measurements display while The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-
plete stop. met for the event to begin. the event is taking place. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 display until pressed. The distance and speed measurements will continue to the FUNCTION SELECT button is Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and prepare the cluster to record a new run. 1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds and the vehicles speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/4 mile). The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph
(0 km/h). The word READY will flash when condi-
tions are met for the event to begin. Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds. 4 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed. The time and speed will continue to display until the Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and display the vehicles best 1/8 mile
(1/4 mile) run. To clear the vehicles best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run, press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds. Instantaneous G-Force When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(longitude and latitude) along with a friction circle that displays the directions of the forces. Peak G-Force When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values (two longitude and two latitude). When a force greater than zero is measured, the display will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display. Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the peak force values. Digital Speedometer When selected, this screen displays vehicle speed and records top speed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for three seconds to toggle between current speed and top speed. To reset top speed, quickly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button when top speed is dis-
played. Compass Display COMPASS Button The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight com-
pass readings and the outside temperature. Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. 2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-
mately two seconds. 3. Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC. 4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration. The message CAL will display in the EVIC. 5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL message turns off. The compass will now function nor-
mally. 4 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North. In some areas of the country, the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is located. Compass Variance Map 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. 2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi-
mately two seconds. 3. Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC. 4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map. 5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit. Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor-
mation on the current surround mode. Stereo Audio Surround UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNC-
TION SELECT button to change surround modes. System Warnings (Customer Information Features) Press and release the MENU button until SYSTEM WARNINGS displays in the EVIC. Then, press the SCROLL button to display anyone of the following choices. Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature. Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure. Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE). 4 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK. Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC. Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices. Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the FUNC-
TION SELECT button while in this display to select En-
glish, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language. NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnectt lan-
guage selection. Refer to Language Selection under Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) in Section 3. Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h) When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears. Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the drivers door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears. Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the drivers door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, both of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
LECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears. Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap-
pears. Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
LECT button until ON or OFF appears. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Headlamps On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO (A) position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears. NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to Lights in Section 3. Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears. 4 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF, 30 sec., 60 sec., or 90 sec. appears. Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out-
lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off, 45 sec., 5 min., 10 min., 30 min., or 60 min. appears. Turn-by-Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig-
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears. Display Units of Measure In The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears. RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help you understand and save you concern about these ap-
parent malfunctions, you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals. Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals: AM or Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to vary; and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude, and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal. AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines and neon signs. FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear, which is the major feature of FM radio. 4 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls, and 6-disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit, under Personal Settings (Cus-
tomer Programmable Features), under Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4. SALES CODE REQ AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate. RET Radio Operating Instructions - Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it. SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time. Voice Recognition Button (UConnectt Hands-Free Phone) If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) in Section 3. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen. 4 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Phone Button (UConnectt Hands-Free Phone) If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) in Section 3. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen. TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays. Clock Setting Procedure 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save the time change. 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry. Once in this display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2. INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies. TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade. 4 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information. Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display No program type or un-
defined Adult Hits Classical Classic Rock College Country Foreign Language None Adlt Hit Classicl Cls Rock College Country Language Program Type Information Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies Personality Public Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock Soft Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports Talk 16-Digit Character Display Inform Jazz News Nostalga Oldies Persnlty Public R & B Rel Musc Rel Talk Rock Soft Soft Rck Soft R & B Sports Talk Program Type 16-Digit Character Display Top 40 Weather Top 40 Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to select an entry and make changes. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode, selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu (if equipped). DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button (if equipped). DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following:
Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (if equipped). Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages (if supported on the disc) (if equipped). 4 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if equipped). NOTE: The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc. NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing a DVD. Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save changes. Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items, and set defaults according to customer preference. Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language (effective only if language supported by disc). If you want to select a language not listed, then scroll down and select 9other.9 Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select. Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting 9other.9 Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select. Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting 9other.9 Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select. Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On. Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range. The default is set to 9High,9 and under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is 9Normal.9 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen, pan scan, and letter box. AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play. NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer-preferred settings. AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes. 4 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory. You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations}. DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes. Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times. CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc. CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 43/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism. 4 NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc(s) Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays 9INSERT DISC,9 insert the CD into the player. Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc(s) Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc. 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio. The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. SEEK Button (CD MODE) Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD, MP3/MWA modes. SCAN Button (CD MODE) Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing. TIME Button (CD MODE) Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display. RW/FF (CD MODE) Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button works in a similar manner. AM or FM Button (CD MODE) Switches the radio to the Radio mode. Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the following restrictions. Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3. Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Maximum number of directory levels: 8 Maximum number of files: 255 Maximum number of folders: 100 Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension) character extension) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times. If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc. Supported MP3/WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3/WMA extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files named with the MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file. 4 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates. MPEG Specifi-
cation Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz) MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32 MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16 WMA Specifica-
tion Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz) WMA 44.1 and 48 Bit Rate (kbps) 320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48 160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48 Bit Rate (kbps) 48, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios. Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported. Playback of MP3/WMA Files When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3/WMA files. Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be affected by the following:
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer CD-R media to load than non-multisession discs Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc. LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files). The folder list will time out after five seconds. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available). Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed time9 priority mode. Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file. Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to 9elapsed time9 display. Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize the vehicles audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers. 4 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected. NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the devices volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the devices volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the devices volume down. SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds. RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode) No function. SET Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function. Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System (VR) (If Equipped) For the radio, refer to Voice Recognition System (VR) in Section 3. For UConnectt Voice Recognition System (VR), refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) in Section 3. Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) (If Equipped) Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) in Section 3. Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If Equipped) Refer to Satellite Radio in this section. Dolbyt Manufactured under license from Dolbyt Laboratories. 9Dolbyt9 and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolbyt Laboratories. Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS 9DTS9 and 9DTS 2.09 are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc. SALES CODE RER MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the units faceplate. The RER Multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius Satellite Radio player, navigation system, CD/DVD player, USB port, 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and the UConnectt Hands-Free Bluetootht cellular system. 4 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnectt, NOTE:
the unit will respond with a Not Equipped With UConnectt message when selecting controls related to this feature. A 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows easy menu selec-
tion, while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertain-
ment, and hands-free mobile phone use. The satellite navigation capability combines a Global-
Positioning System (GPS)-based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identi-
fication, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes. A shared HDD for the navigation system, the database, and other radio features allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote database finds the artist, track, and title for the music. Other special features include direct tune, music type selections, traffic messaging (optional), easy store presets, backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and on some models, a dual display screen operation. Refer to your Navigation Users Manual for detailed operating instructions. Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation Users Manual for detailed operating instructions. Operating Instructions Hands-Free Communication (UConnectT) (If Equipped) Refer to your Navigation Users Manual for detailed operating instructions. Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
tems clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set. Changing the Time Zone 1. Turn on the multimedia system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words Time: GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen, proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3. 3. If the words Time: User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the words User Clock are displayed. The GPS time setting menu will appear on the screen. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 4. Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen. 5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you want to select, touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu. Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected, this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 4 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings. Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis-
played to change the current setting. Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock, you can manually adjust the time by performing the following:
1. Turn on the multimedia system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words Time: User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen, proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3. 3. If the words Time: GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the words GPS Time are displayed. The user clock time setting menu will appear on the screen. 4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed. 5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed. 6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word Save is displayed. Show Time if Radio is Off When selected, this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off. Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting. SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY) Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents. Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) Please have the following information available when calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID). 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number. 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen. ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio faceplate. Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen. All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display. ESN/SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio faceplate. Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display. Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until 9SAT9 appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode. Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped). Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna. structure or under a physical obstacle. Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause intermittent reception. form of short audio mutes. cause signal blockage. Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it. SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time. INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display). 4 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen. RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows. TUNE Control (Rotary) Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type. By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel. MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from which you can make a selection. Once a selection is made, you can seek up, or down, or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format. There is no time-out for this screen. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the MUSIC TYPE screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and scan will no longer be based on your selection. SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:
Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription. SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory. You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice. Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display. Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations). Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped) Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) in Section 3. 4 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL KICKERT HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from any stereo audio source. A new feature of the Kickert audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source. Audio Surround is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source. This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) under Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) in Section 4. DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround, which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants. The Video Surround mode is described under Kickert Mobile Surround (KMS1).t Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode. When in Audio Surround mode, balance is set auto-
matically. Fader control is available to add more sur-
round audio if desired. REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 oclock positions. Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive display. This is located in the instrument cluster below the speedometer. VOLUME Button The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system. Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level. Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to decrease the sound level. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen displays radio and media mode information depending on which radio is in the vehicle. 4 If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the mode will change (i.e., from AM to FM, to Media mode, etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle). FUNCTION SELECT Button When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to operate various radio, media, and Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions
(i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to or start playing songs in playlists, etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI). 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SCROLL Button When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters, files, etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle. CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. 3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc. 4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners, or antistatic sprays. 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high. RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 CLIMATE CONTROLS Blower Control Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System control Use this to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O
(Off) position. There are four blower speeds. 4 NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O (Off) position. The Manual Temperature Control consists of a series of outer rotary dials and inner pushbuttons. 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger compartment. The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures. If your air conditioning performance seems NOTE:
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator) for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. Mode Control Use this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode as iden-
tified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes. Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel and the center console. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear. Bi-Level Air is directed through the instrument panel, center console and floor outlets. NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions. Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets. Mix Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting. 4 NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, Defrost, and Floor or a blend of these modes, even if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary. Recirculation Control Use this button to block the flow of outside air from coming into the passenger compart-
ment. A light will illuminate when the sys-
tem is in recirculation mode. Use the recir-
culation mode to provide maximum A/C performance in hot ambient conditions, or to block outside odors, dust, etc. 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE:
Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather may cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture build-up inside the vehicle. Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging. The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
when the recirculation button is pressed. ing the mode control selection. Air Conditioning Control Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for a few seconds. MAX A/C For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation buttons at the same time. Economy Mode If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature. Operating Tips NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions. Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection. Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging. Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather. NOTE: Recirculation without A/C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur. Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors. 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. A/C Air Filter If Equipped The A/C Air Filter will reduce, but not eliminate, diesel and agricultural smells. The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for A/C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service. Refer to the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual for filter service intervals. Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS m Starting Procedures . 214 N Automatic Transmission . 215 N Keyless Go . 216 N Normal Starting . 217 N Extremely Cold Weather
(Below 220F Or 229C) . 217 N If Engine Fails To Start
. 218 N After Starting . 219 m Engine Block Heater If Equipped . 219 5 m Automatic Transmission . 220 N General Information . 220 N Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . 222 N 5-Speed Automatic Transmission . 223 m AutoStickt . 228 N AutoStickt Operation . 228 N AutoStickt General Information . 229 m Driving On Slippery Surfaces . 229 N Acceleration . 229 212 STARTING AND OPERATING m Driving Through Water N Traction . 230
. 230 N Flowing/Rising Water . 230 m Parking Brake . 232 m Brake System . 234 N Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . 235 m Power Steering . 237 m Electronic Brake Control System . 238 N ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . 238 N TCS (Traction Control System)
. 239 N BAS (Brake Assist System) . 239 N ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
. 240 N Synchronizing ESP . 244 N ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And ESP/TCS Indicator Light . 244 m Tire Safety Information . 245 N Tire Markings . 245 N Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . 250 m Tires General Information . 254 N Tire Pressure . 254 N Tire Inflation Pressures . 255 N Radial Ply Tires
. 257 N Tire Spinning . 258 N Tread Wear Indicators . 258 N Life Of Tire . 259 N Replacement Tires . 260 N Alignment And Balance . 261 m Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) m Tire Chains . 261 m Snow Tires
. 262 m Tire Rotation Recommendations
. 262 N Tire Rotation Standard Tires . 263 N Tire Rotation Optional Tires . 263
. 264 N Premium System . 266 N General Information . 269 m Fuel Requirements . 270 N 6.1L Engine . 270 N Reformulated Gasoline . 270 N Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . 271 N MMT In Gasoline . 271 N Materials Added To Fuel
. 272 STARTING AND OPERATING 213 m Adding Fuel N Fuel System Cautions . 272 N Carbon Monoxide Warnings . 273
. 274 N Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
. 274 N Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . 275 m Vehicle Loading . 276 N Vehicle Certification Label
. 276 N Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . 276 N Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . 276 N Overloading . 277 N Loading . 277 m Trailer Towing . 278 m Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . 278 5 214 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Dont leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death. Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the shift lever. Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the ex-
haust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle fire, which may cause serious or fatal injuries. Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear. STARTING AND OPERATING 215 CAUTION!
a complete stop. Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 5 216 STARTING AND OPERATING Keyless Go This function allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the ENGINE START/STOP button is installed and the Keyless Go igni-
tion key (FOBIK) is in the passen-
ger compartment. Installing And Removing The Engine Start/Stop Button 1. Remove the ignition key (FOBIK). 2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the ignition switch. NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button can be re-
moved from the ignition switch (WIN) for regular igni-
tion key (FOBIK) use. vate the radio, wipers, and windows. Keyless Go Functions With Drivers Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Position) Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to acti-
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to activate the heating/air conditioning (HVAC) controls, and the instrument cluster. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times to turn off the ignition switch. Keyless Go Functions - With Drivers Foot On The Brake Pedal (PARK or NEUTRAL Gear Position Only) Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to oper-
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to start ate all of the accessories. the engine. Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button (Tip Start) NOTE: Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal. Press and hold your foot on the brake pedal and then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button twice. The starter motor will engage and continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automati-
cally in 10 seconds. If this occurs, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure. To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. Press and hold your foot on the brake pedal. 2. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. STARTING AND OPERATING 217 Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start) NOTE: Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal. Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automati-
cally when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure. Extremely Cold Weather (Below 220F or 229C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended. 5 218 STARTING AND OPERATING If Engine Fails To Start WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly. Refer to Section 6 for proper jump-starting procedures and follow them carefully. Clearing A Flooded Engine - Using ENGINE START/STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather9 proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold the brake pedal with your left foot, push and hold the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor with your right foot, and then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button twice. The starter motor will en-
gage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disen-
gage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure. Clearing A Flooded Engine - Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure. CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. STARTING AND OPERATING 219 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module. 5 WARNING!
After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. 220 STARTING AND OPERATING AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION!
a complete stop. Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal. WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au-
tomatically, dependent upon:
Altitude Vehicle loading Driving style Shift lever position Accelerator position Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-
pendent on the driving style, the driving situation, and the road characteristics. NOTE:
After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating, especially when the engine is cold. If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Trans-
mission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first. STARTING AND OPERATING 221 The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break-in period. This is a normal condition, and pre-
cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles. The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release. Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied. Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position. 5 222 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is run-
ning. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition, the transmission shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle. Over-Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the trans-
mission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds nor-
mal operating temperature, the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in DRIVE position. After the transmis-
sion cools down, it will return to normal operation. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position, and the brake pedal must be depressed. BTSI Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access the override (using a flat-bladed screwdriver), carefully remove the override cover which is located on the right of the shift lever gate. STARTING AND OPERATING 223 5-Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears. 5 Brake Interlock Override To activate the override, first insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the ACC or ON position. Then, press the pink-colored tab through the access port with a small flat-bladed screwdriver or alike. While pressing the override tab, move the shift lever out of the PARK position. When complete, return the override cover to its original position. Shift Lever 224 STARTING AND OPERATING Gear Ranges PARK PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the P position. CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position. Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage. STARTING AND OPERATING 225 REVERSE Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is com-
pletely stopped. NEUTRAL In NEUTRAL, no power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads). The engine may be started in this range. Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed. WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. 5 226 STARTING AND OPERATING DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-
ing into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers, use the AutoStickt mode and select the 3 range. Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation, you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode. If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Sec-
ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position. 3. Turn OFF the engine. 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. STARTING AND OPERATING 227 Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears. Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three times. Follow the reset procedure described under Tem-
porary Transmission Limp Home Mode in this section. In Permanent Limp Home Mode, PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may illuminate. 5 228 STARTING AND OPERATING AUTOSTICKT Autostickt is a driver-interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle. Autostickt allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations. AutostickT Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the shift lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator. NOTE:
In Autostickt mode, the transmission will only shift up and down when the driver manually moves the shift lever right (D+) or left (D-). An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the in-
strument cluster when using Autostickt. This message appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the next gear. The UPSHIFT message will display while operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions per minute (RPM). You can shift in or out of the Autostickt mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. When you wish to engage Autostickt, simply move the shift lever to the right (D+) or left (D-) while in the DRIVE position. The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen. When you wish to disen-
gage Autostickt, hold the shift lever to the right for at least gear when coming to a stop. one second. The transmission will now operate automati-
cally, shifting between the five available gears. AutostickT General Information You can start out in 1st or 2nd gear. The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. The transmission will automatically downshift to 1st Starting out in 2nd gear is helpful in snowy or icy Avoid using speed control when Autostickt is en-
The transmission will not automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while Autostickt is engaged. Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when conditions. gaged. Autostickt is engaged. STARTING AND OPERATING 229 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels. WARNING!
5 Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). 230 STARTING AND OPERATING Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. 3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Flowing/Rising Water WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or paths surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so. CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water, and if there are any obstacles in the way, before driving through the standing water. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. STARTING AND OPERATING 231 CAUTION!
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicles drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicles fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Getting water inside your vehicles engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 232 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cles traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cles braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. Getting water inside your vehicles engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you stranded. Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis-
sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-
nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal and then release. STARTING AND OPERATING 233 5 Parking Brake The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is ON. NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 234 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Dont leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident. BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light. In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up. The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle. When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h). STARTING AND OPERATING 235 ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops. You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti-Lock:
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a The clicking sound of solenoid valves, Brake pedal pulsations, and A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end short time after the stop), of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS. 5 236 STARTING AND OPERATING The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated elec-
WARNING!
tronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condi-
tion of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others. All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer. Anti-Lock Brake Light The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on. If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible. If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. Increased noise levels at the end of the steering NOTE:
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system. STARTING AND OPERATING 237 Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system. WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. 5 CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur. 238 STARTING AND OPERATING ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), the TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assist System), and the ESP (Electronic Stability Program). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions. ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau-
lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. For more information about ABS, refer to Anti-Lock Brake System in Section 5. WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others. TCS (Traction Control System) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. BAS (Brake Assist System) This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli-
cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. STARTING AND OPERATING 239 WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others. 5 240 STARTING AND OPERATING ESP (Electronic Stability Program) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path. The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer. Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. WARNING!
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those result-
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, at-
tentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others. STARTING AND OPERATING 241 The ESP system has three available operating modes:
ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows. 5 242 STARTING AND OPERATING The ESP OFF switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the Par-
tial Off mode, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESP ON again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will turn off. ESP OFF Switch NOTE: To improve the vehicles traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momen-
tarily depressing the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. Full Off This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESP stability features are turned OFF. To enter the Full Off mode, depress and hold the ESP OFF switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will illuminate, and the 9ESP OFF9 message will display in the vehicle odometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOM-
ETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear STARTING AND OPERATING 243 NOTE: When the ESP is switched OFF, a feature of the system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential. If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. To improve the vehicles traction when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch. 5 this message. The ESP OFF message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in Sec-
tion 4. To turn ESP ON again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch. NOTE: The 9ESP OFF9 message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved into the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur when the message was previously cleared. WARNING!
In the ESP Full Off mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are cancelled. There-
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. 244 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING!
With the ESP switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not en-
gage to assist in maintaining stability. The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off-highway or off-road only. Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator. If the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indica-
tor Light may illuminate with the engine running. If this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right. The ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light should go out. However, if the light remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP/TCS Indicator Light The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the yellow ESP/TCS Indicator Light in the instru-
ment cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. They should go out with the engine running. The system will turn the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilome-
ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. NOTE:
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Mal-
function Indicator Light will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation. will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously. STARTING AND OPERATING 245 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 5 1 U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN) 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades 246 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE:
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M. High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. Tire Sizing Chart Size Designation:
TIRE SIZING TERMS P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards T = Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code 9R9 means radial construction 9D9 means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in) STARTING AND OPERATING 247 5 248 STARTING AND OPERATING Service Description:
95 = Load Index TIRE SIZING TERMS A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load = Light load tire C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER STARTING AND OPERATING 249 EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week. 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 5 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the drivers door or the drivers side B-Pillar. Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) total weight your vehicle can carry 3) tire size designed for your vehicle 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Tire Placard Location Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to Vehicle Loading in this section. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The STARTING AND OPERATING 251 combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicles placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]). 5 252 STARTING AND OPERATING 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). STARTING AND OPERATING 253 5 254 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING!
1. Safety Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents. Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure. Over-inflation reduces a tires ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. 2. Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption. 3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the drivers door or on the drivers side B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual. STARTING AND OPERATING 255 5 Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. 256 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mi (1 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12F (7C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68F (20C) and the outside temperature = 32F (0C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12F (7C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious accident. Dont drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). STARTING AND OPERATING 257 Radial Ply Tires WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine them with other types of tires. 5 Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicles wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h). Refer to the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6. WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicles wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and dont let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style Tire pressure Distance driven STARTING AND OPERATING 259 WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. 5 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of un-
approved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have an accident. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire fail-
ure and loss of vehicle control. STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration. Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear. TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended. CAUTION!
5 Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used. CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. Alignment And Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in:
Fast tire wear. Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided Vehicle pull to right or left. Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right. Alignment will not correct this condition. See your authorized dealer for proper diagnosis. wear. 262 STARTING AND OPERATING SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S designation on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the recommended tire rotation frequency. Remember, more frequent rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation. Tire Rotation Standard Tires The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped with all season tires is the forward-cross as shown in the following diagram. STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Tire Rotation Optional Tires The suggested rotation method is the side-to-side as shown in the following diagram. This method is required due to different size tires on the front and rear of the vehicle. 5 264 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12F (6.5C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mi (1 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicles tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM]
Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68F (20C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20F (-7C) will decrease the tire pressure to ap-
proximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pres-
sure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicles recom-
mended cold placard pressure value. STARTING AND OPERATING 265 CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPM sensor. 5 266 STARTING AND OPERATING while adjusting your tire pressure. NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light. Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. It is particularly important for you to check the NOTE:
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module, Four TPM sensors, STARTING AND OPERATING 267 Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing. 5 tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and CORAX Receiver module, Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicles recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash-
ing, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion. Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a 9CHECK TPM SYSTEM9 message for If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash, and the 9CHECK TPM SYSTEM9 message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors, or equipped with the incorrect type of TPM sensors. STARTING AND OPERATING 269 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration. The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
5 United States . KR5S120123 Canada . 2671-S120123 270 STARTING AND OPERATING FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6.1L Engine The 6.1L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available. Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline. Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality. The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components. Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol, it does not have the negative effects of methanol. STARTING AND OPERATING 271 MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline. 5 272 STARTING AND OPERATING Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. Fuel System Cautions CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles performance:
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mal-
functions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
NOTE:
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. Keep the trunk/liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poison-
ous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. 5 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. Fuel Fill Cap NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door. CAUTION!
the fuel system. Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top off the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on. WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled. Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. running. NOTE:
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn STARTING AND OPERATING 275 on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled. When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOM-
ETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL. Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Section 7. 5 276 STARTING AND OPERATING VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label. This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated. Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the drivers door. The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Type of Vehicle Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH) The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Overloading The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR. The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR. STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles. Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicles GVWR. Loading To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. 5 278 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the drivers door for your vehicles GVWR and GAWRs. TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended. If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four NOTE:
wheels are off the ground. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS m Hazard Warning Flasher . 280 m If Your Engine Overheats . 280 m TIREFIT Tire Repair . 281 m Jump Starting . 286 m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . 289 m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . 291 N Without The Ignition Key . 291 N Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) . 291 N Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly . 292 6 280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The hazard warning switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel. Depress the switch to activate the flashers. When activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers. Hazard Warning Switch This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the hazard warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. NOTE: With extended use, the hazard warning flashers may wear down your battery. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion. On the highways Slow down. In city traffic While stopped, put transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and the Fan control to HI. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240F
(116C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 230F (93110C). If the pointer remains at 240F
(116C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 281 WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. TIREFIT TIRE REPAIR Small punctures, particularly those in the tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4F (-20C). 6 282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES The TIREFIT system is located under an access panel in the trunk. TIREFIT Location Tire Fit Kit 1. Air pump hose 2. Power plug and cable 3. AIR PUMP switch 4. Pressure gauge 5. TIREFIT sealant bottle 6. TIREFIT sealant hose WARNING!
Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the vehicle close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or repairing a tire. Cuts or punctures larger than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm), tire damage caused by driving with extremely low tire pressure or on a flat tire, or a damaged wheel can pose a hazard while driving. TIREFIT should not be used in such circumstances. Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances. Contact your nearest autho-
rized dealer for assistance. Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swal-
lowed, or absorbed through the skin: It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Any contact with eyes or skin should be flushed immediately with plenty of water. If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT, change clothing as soon as possible. In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immedi-
ately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. Keep away from open flame or heat source. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283 Sealing Tire with TIREFIT 1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn OFF the engine, and set the parking brake. 3. Remove the TIREFIT kit from the trunk. 4. Pull the power plug 2 and the TIREFIT sealant hose 6 out from the TIREFIT kit. 5. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflated tire. 6. Screw the fitting at the end of TIREFIT sealant hose 6 coming from the sealant bottle 5 onto the tire valve. 7. Insert the power plug 2 into the power point on the instrument panel. 8. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in PARK and start the engine. 6 284 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 9. Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON). The air pump should start to inflate the tire and the tire sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the sealant bottle 5 through the TIREFIT sealant hose 6 and into the tire. 10. Allow the air pump to run for five minutes and then read the pressure gauge 4. If the tire inflates to 26 psi (1.8 bar) or greater, proceed to Step 19 of this procedure. If not, proceed to the following step. 11. Press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF). Then, disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place it back in the vehicle. 12. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle back and forth approximately 30 ft (9.1 m) to distribute the sealant more evenly within the tire. 13. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 14. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn OFF the engine, and set the parking brake. 15. Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the underside of the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open. 16. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and flip the hose valve closed. 17. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in PARK and start the engine. 18. Press the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON). The air pump should inflate the tire to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within five minutes. If the tire inflates to this level, proceed to the following step. NOTE: If a tire pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar) is not obtained within five minutes, the tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. 19. With a tire pressure of no less than 26 psi (1.8 bar) press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF) and turn off the engine. Then, disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place it back in the vehicle. 20. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle for approximately 10 minutes to ensure optimum distribu-
tion of the tire sealant within the tire. 21. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 22. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn OFF the engine, and set the parking brake. 23. Disconnect the air pump hose 1 from the underside of the sealant bottle 5 by flipping the hose valve open. 24. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and flip the hose valve closed. 25. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the pressure gauge 4. If the pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or greater, proceed to the following step. NOTE: If the pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar), the tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 285 26. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in PARK and start the engine. 27. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar by pressing the switch 3 on the air pump to I (ON) and watching the pressure gauge. When the tire pressure is set to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label, press the AIR PUMP switch 3 to 0 (OFF) and turn off the engine. 28. Disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and reinstall the valve cap. 29. Place the sealant kit back in the trunk of the vehicle. Replace the sealant bottle at your nearest authorized MOPARt parts dealership. 30. Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center. 6 286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE:
If a pressure of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar) cannot be maintained in the tire, the tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. Do not operate the electric air pump for more than eight minutes to avoid overheating. The air pump may be used again once it has cooled down. Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle 5 once every four If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once TIREFIT sealing material has dried, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire has years to assure optimum operation of the system. been inspected. JUMP STARTING WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan. equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully. Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, or clothing. Dont lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water. A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes. that exceeds 12 Volts. and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. 1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact. 2. When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch one another. WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287 3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmis-
sion in PARK, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position on both vehicles. 4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal loads. 5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine com-
partment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the following illustration for jump-starting connections. 6 288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to the following illustration for jump-starting connections. 7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes. Then, start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. NOTE: Refer to 9Synchronizing ESP9 under 9Electronic Stability Program9 in Section 5 if the ESP/BAS light (in the instrument cluster) remains on continuously after starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan. Jump-Starting WARNING!
or towing. You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode. During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting because the battery could rupture or explode. The battery temperature must be brought above the freezing point before attempting jump-start. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-
VERSE and DRIVE. Usually, the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin-
ning the wheels is most effective. NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) before rocking the vehicle. Refer to Electronic Stability Program, or Traction Control in Section 5. 6 290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION!
When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h). WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicles wheels faster than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and dont let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flat-bed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle. Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground) Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the following limitations. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291 With The Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be traveled must not exceed 30 mi (48 km), and the towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 mi (48 km), the vehicle must be transported using a flat-bed truck. 6 292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION!
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the front fascia will result. If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 mi (48 km), then the only approved method of towing is with a flat-bed truck. Damage to the transmission may result. Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result. the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the key must be in the ON position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL. Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS m Engine Compartment 6.1L . 296 m Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II . 297 N Loose Fuel Filler Cap . 297 m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs
. 298 m Replacement Parts . 299 m Dealer Service . 300 m Maintenance Procedures . 300
. 301 N Engine Oil N Engine Oil Filter . 303 N Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension . 303 N Spark Plugs . 304 N Engine Air Cleaner Filter . 304 N Fuel Filter
. 304 N Catalytic Converter . 305 N Maintenance-Free Battery . 307 N Air Conditioner Maintenance . 309 N A/C Air Filter If Equipped . 310 7 294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE N Power Steering Fluid Check . 310 N Front And Rear Suspension Ball Joints
. 311 N Steering Linkage . 311 N Body Lubrication . 311 N Windshield Wiper Blades . 312 N Windshield Washers . 312 N Exhaust System . 313 N Cooling System . 314 N Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . 319 N Fuel System . 319 N Brake System . 320 N Automatic Transmission . 322 N Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . 324 N Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . 324 N Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders . 328 m Fuses . 329 N Integrated Power Module (IPM) . 329 N Rear Power Distribution Center . 331 m Vehicle Storage . 335 m Replacement Light Bulbs
. 336 m Bulb Replacement
. 337 N Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, And Park/Turn Light Models With High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlights . 337
. 338
. 338 N Front/Rear Side Marker Light N Tail/Turn/Stop Light N Center Tail/Backup Light
. 340 N Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . 340 N License Light
. 340 m Fluid Capacities . 341 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295 m Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . 342 N Engine . 342 N Chassis
. 343 7 296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6.1L 1 Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post 2 Fuses (Integrated Power Module) 3 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 Coolant Bottle 6 Power Steering Fluid 7 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Engine Oil Fill 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Windshield Washer Fluid Bottle ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297 CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the 7 298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of this vehicles emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test. This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if this vehicles OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch. 2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine. 3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 4. As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. 5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the vehicles OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the vehicles OBD II system is ready, and you can proceed to the I/M station. If the OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299 as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether the vehicles OBD II system is ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPARt parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPARt parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturers warranty. 7 300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these service manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE:
systems can result against you. Intentional tampering with emissions control in civil penalties being assessed WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals, there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance. However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance. These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301 CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first. 7 302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or SM/CF, and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725. The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil, such as Mobil 1t SAE 0W-40 or equivalent. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) SAE 0W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in 6.1L engines within the operating temperatures shown in the engine oil viscosity chart. SAE 5W-40 engine oil is also allowed for use in 6.1L engines. The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be selected based on the following recommendation and be within the operating tempera-
ture shown in the engine oil viscosity chart. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the Engine Com-
partment illustration in this section. Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta-
tion, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturers engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303 of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPARt engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended. Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner. Therefore, no belt tension adjustments are required. However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected periodically and replaced if re-
quired. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure. Inspect belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or frayed cords and replace if there is indication of damage that could result in belt failure. Also, check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components. See your authorized dealer for service. 7 304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emissions control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-
lytic converter. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in this section for the proper type of spark plug for use in your vehicle. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for engine air cleaner filter maintenance intervals. NOTE: Be sure to follow the dusty or off-road condi-
tions maintenance interval if applicable. WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting. Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your authorized dealer for service. Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305 CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle. NOTE:
systems can result against you. Intentional tampering with emissions control in civil penalties being assessed 7 306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur, safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the engine OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter, obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturers specifications immediately. To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions. vehicle. Maintenance-Free Battery The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting (Refer to Jump Starting in Section 6 of this manual). MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307 Battery Location 7 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Dont allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Dont lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Dont use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Dont allow cable clamps to touch each other. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information. The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. 7 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor oil, and refrigerants. A/C Air Filter If Equipped The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To replace the filter, remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove the used filter. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter indicate this). Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the recommended air conditioning filter replacement inter-
vals. Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer. No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system; only the approved lubricant may be used. WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine OFF to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid. If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type. Front And Rear Suspension Ball Joints The suspension ball joints should be inspected for exter-
nal leakage or damage when other maintenance is per-
formed. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed. Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including seat tracks, door hinges, trunk hinges, and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism, and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. 7 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPARt Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder. Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. Windshield Washers The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to Exhaust Gas under Safety Tips in Section 2. 7 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cooling System WARNING!
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, dont open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. Coolant Checks Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Cooling System Drain, Flush, and Refill The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8. If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution. Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant. Re-
fer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct coolant type. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-
fied coolant as soon as possible. Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based coolants. Use of propylene glycol-based coolants is not recommended. 7 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This coolant can be used up to five years or 100,000 mi (160 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant. When adding coolant:
The manufacturer recommends using MOPARt Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology). Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below 234F (237C) are anticipated. Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. Please note that it is the owners responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. WARNING!
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your 7 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. Points to Remember NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing. If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks. Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine, which contains aluminum components. Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean, also. Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots, brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber. Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component, which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present. Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure. Fuel System The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel systems hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline. You are urged to use only the manufacturers specified hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service. 7 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Care should be taken with installing quick connect fittings to ensure they are properly installed and fully connected. See your authorized dealer for service. Brake System In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-
nance Schedule in Section 8. WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You wouldnt have your full braking capacity in an emergency. Brake and Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance, inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present. NOTE:
Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is replaced based on leakage. Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hy-
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately. Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure. WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure. You could have an accident. If you see any signs of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake hoses replaced immediately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure. Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir. Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system. Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. 7 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type. WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification, may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking. You could have an accident. Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture. CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Seal damage may result. Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted. If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level. CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturers recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type. The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the transmission may occur. Your au-
thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the recommended transmission fluid and filter change inter-
vals. If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed. Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmis-
sion fluid. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant may be used. 7 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. Front And Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed. No regular maintenance is required for these compo-
nents. Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation. Stone and gravel impact. Insects, tree sap, and tar. Salt in the air near seacoast localities. Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPARt Car Wash or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPARt Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. Use MOPARt Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. 7 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner. If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed. If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider Use MOPARt Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. mud or stone shields behind each wheel. Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPARt Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPARt or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish. Interior Care Use MOPARt Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPARt Carpet Cleaner for carpeting. Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, or MOPARt Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPARt Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. MOPARt Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARt Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition. WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass; and therefore, different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPARt Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear 7 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. 2. Dry with a soft tissue. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use MOPARt Total Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console. NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed. FUSES Integrated Power Module (IPM) The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment. This module contains fuses and relays. Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 CAUTION!
When installing the integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system failure. When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. 7 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Cavity Cartridge Mini-
Fuse 15 Amp Blue 25 Amp Neutral 25 Amp Neutral 25 Amp Neutral 25 Amp Neutral 25 Amp Neutral Description Washer Motor Powertrain Control Mod-
ule (PCM) Ignition Run/Start EGR Solenoid/Alternator Ignition Coils/Injectors Starter Windshield Wiper Fuse 30 Amp Pink 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Fuse 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 50 Amp Red 50 Amp Red Mini-
Fuse Description Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Valves Radiator Fan Lo/High Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump Motor Radiator Fan Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 Rear Power Distribution Center 7 Access Panel 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure. When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Cavity Cartridge Fuse 60 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink Mini-
Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow Description Ignition Off Draw (IOD) Integrated Power Module
(IPM) Integrated Power Module
(IPM) Heated Seats - if equipped Fuel Pump Sub Amp - if equipped Cavity Cartridge Fuse 8 9 10 11 *
12 *
13 *
14 15 16 Mini-
Fuse 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red Description Diagnostic Link Connec-
tor (DLC)/Wireless Con-
trol Module (WCM)/
Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN) Power Outlet AC Heater Control/
Cluster/Security Module
- if equipped Cavity Cartridge Fuse 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 Mini-
Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red Description Cluster Selectable Power Outlet Stop Lights Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) 7 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Fuse 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Mini-
Fuse 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Orange 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Orange Description Ignition Run Cluster/Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP)/
Powertrain Control Mod-
ule (PCM)/STOP LIGHT Switch Door Modules/Power Mirrors/Steering Control Module (SCM) Antenna Module - if equipped/Power Mirrors Cavity Cartridge Fuse 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Mini-
Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Orange 10 Amp Red Description Hands-Free Phone - if equipped//Radio Transmission Cargo Light/Vehicle In-
formation Module - if equipped Heated Mirrors - if equipped Auto Inside Rearview Mirror/Heated Seats - if equipped/Switch Bank AC Heater Control/
Headlights/Tire Pressure Monitoring - if equipped Front Blower Motor 30 Amp Pink Cavity Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue Mini-
Fuse Description Rear Window Defroster Amplifier - if equipped/
Sunroof - if equipped 43 44
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an autho-
rized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power window switch, and the passenger power window switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for service. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 7 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights. W5W Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light . 562 Overhead Console Reading Lights. 578 Visor Vanity Lights . A6220 Glove Box Light . 194 Door Courtesy . 562 Shift Indicator Light . JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket /
Cupholder Lighting . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer) NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions. All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement. Bulb Number LIGHT BULBS Exterior Low Beam Headlight High Intensity Discharge (HID) . D1S
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer) High Beam Headlight. 9005 Front Park/Turn Light . 3157A Front Fog Light. 9145/H10
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Front Side Marker . 168 Tail Light . 3057K Tail/Stop/Turn Light . 3057K Rear Side Marker . 168 Backup Light . 921 Center High-Mount Stop Light
(CHMSL) . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer) License. 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and Park/Turn Light Models with High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlights HID Headlights The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the HEADLIGHT switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlights when the HEADLIGHT switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your au-
thorized dealer for service. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlights, when the headlights are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges. 7 Tail/Turn/Stop Light 1. Open the trunk. 2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail light retainer. 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Front/Rear Side Marker Light 1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to disengage the clip. NOTE:
If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to scratch the paint. 2. Rotate the bulbs socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing. 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb. 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place. 5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker. 3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail light assembly. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 4. Pull back the trunk liner. 5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the tail light assembly. 6. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs. 7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side. 8. Disconnect the electrical connector. 9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly. 10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 7 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly, and then turn it clockwise. 12. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical connector, and trunk liner. 13. Close the trunk. Center Tail/Backup Light See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement. Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) The CHMSL uses LED lights that are not serviceable separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer. License Light 1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia. 2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly. 3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 1 License Light Bulb 2 Socket 4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly. 5. Reattach the light to the rear fascia, and then install the screws. FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) Engine Oil with Filter 6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40) Cooling System *
6.1 Liter Engine (MOPARt Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 U.S. 19 Gallons 7 Quarts Metric 72 Liters 6.6 Liters 15 Quarts 14.4 Liters 7 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil (6.1L) Oil Filter (6.1L) Spark Plugs (6.1L) Fuel Selection (6.1L) Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts MOPARt Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or SM/CF, and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10725. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil, such as Mobil 1t SAE 0W-40 or equivalent. For additional information, refer to the Engine Oil Selection and Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) in the Maintenance Pro-
cedures section of this manual. MOPARt 05281090 or equivalent PLZTR5A-13 (Gap.050 in [1.27 mm]) Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher Chassis Component Automatic Transmission Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Rear Axle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts MOPARt ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MOPARt DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. MOPARt Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPARt ATF+4 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent 7 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS m Emission Control System Maintenance . 346 m Maintenance Schedule . 346 N Required Maintenance Intervals . 348 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 346 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type, must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the Emission Control System. These, and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected. NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Oil Change Required will be displayed in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is neces-
sary. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 mi (805 km). NOTE:
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated. vehicle for an extended period of time. Change your engine oil more often if you drive your Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first. Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required under Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in Section 4. At Each Stop for Fuel Check the engine oil level. Refer to Engine Oil under Check the windshield washer solvent and add if Maintenance Procedures in Section 7. required. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 347 damage. Once a Month Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake Check all lights and other electrical items for correct master cylinder, and add as needed. as required. operation. At Each Oil Change Change the engine oil filter. Inspect the brake hoses and lines. CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle. M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 348 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Required Maintenance Intervals Maintenance Items Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate the tires. If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if nec-
essary. Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary. Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped). Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months. Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspec-
tion at 12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, and replace if necessary. Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) Miles 6,000 6,000 10 000 10 000 Kilometers 6 6 or Months 12,000 12,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 24,000 24,000 20 000 20 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 40 000 40 000 12 12 12 18 24 24 24 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 349 Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) Miles 30,000 Kilometers 50 000 or Months 30 48,000 80 000 60,000 90,000 102,000 102,000 120,000 100 000 150 000 170 000 170 000 200 000 48 60 90 60 102 120 M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Maintenance Items Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or fre-
quent trailer towing. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. Flush and replace the engine coolant. Replace the spark plugs. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions warranty. 350 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. M A I N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle . 353 N Prepare For The Appointment
. 353 N Prepare A List . 353 N Be Reasonable With Requests . 353 m If You Need Assistance . 353 N Chrysler LLC Customer Center
. 354 N Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . 354 N In Mexico Contact . 354 N Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or N Service Contract Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . 355
. 355 m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . 356 m MOPARtParts . 356 m Reporting Safety Defects . 356 N In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. 356 N In Canada . 357 m Publication Order Forms . 357 9 352 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades . 358 N Treadwear
. 359 N Traction Grades
. 359 N Temperature Grades . 359 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If youre having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicles service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem. Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the specific work you want done. If youve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 353 Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized selling dealer. They know you and the vehicle best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and 9 354 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE high quality service. The manufacturers authorized deal-
ers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealers service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the Manufacturers Cus-
tomer Center. Any communication to the Manufacturers Customer Center should include the following information:
Owners name and address Owners telephone number (home and office) Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (800) 992-1997 Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 4652001 In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F. In Mexico City: 5081-4568 Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1800380CHRY. Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after the manufacturers New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturers Service Contracts. If you purchased a manufacturers Service Contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 355 date. If you have any questions about the service con-
tract, call the manufacturers Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturers Service Contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturers Service Contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturers Service Contract, and you require service after the manufactur-
ers New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. Youll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. in facilities, 9 356 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle. MOPART PARTS MOPARt fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 18883274236 (TTY: 1800424 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 357 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes). Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-
hicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. 9 358 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Owners Manuals These Owners Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-
tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-
ties and safety tips. Call toll free at:
18008904038 (U.S.) 18003871143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tires manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate. Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 359 WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor 9 360 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. INDEX 10 362 INDEX About Your Brakes . 232,234 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . 235,238 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze)
. 316
. 274 Adding Fuel Adding Washer Fluid . 124,312 Additives, Fuel
. 272 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . 304 Air Conditioner Maintenance
. 309 Air Conditioning . 203 Air Conditioning Controls
. 203 Air Conditioning Filter . 208,310 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips
. 209 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . 309,310 Air Conditioning System . 203,309 Air Pressure, Tires
. 156,255 Airbag . 46 Airbag Deployment
. 51,53 Airbag Light
. 52,55,70,152 Airbag Maintenance . 55 Airbag, Side . 47,53 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . 47,53 Alarm, Panic . 25 Alarm (Security Alarm)
. 18,156 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . 18
. 261 Alignment and Balance Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle
. 7 Antenna, Satellite Radio . 196 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . 315,316,341
. 317 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . 235,238 Anti-Lock Warning Light
. 158,236 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm)
. 18 Anti-Theft System . 156 Appearance Care . 324 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm)
. 18 Assistance Towing . 91 Audio Systems (Radio) . 191 Auto Down Power Windows
. 34 Disposal INDEX 363 Auto Unlock, Doors . 31 Automatic Dimming Mirror
. 75 Automatic Door Locks . 31 Automatic Headlights . 117 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives
. 324 Automatic Transmission . 223,322,323 Adding Fluid . 323,343 Autostick . 228 Fluid and Filter Changes . 323 Fluid Change . 323 Fluid Level Check . 322 Fluid Type . 343 Shifting . 223
. 324 Special Additives Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode
. 226,227 Autostick . 228 Axle Fluid . 343 Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid)
. 343 Ball Joints
. 311 Battery . 307 Emergency Starting . 286 Jump Starting . 286 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE)
. 25 Location . 287,307 Bearings
. 324 Belts, Drive . 303 Belts, Seat
. 38,69 Body Mechanism Lubrication . 311 B-Pillar Location . 250 Brake Assist System . 239 Brake Control System, Electronic . 238 Brake Fluid . 343 Brake, Parking . 232 Brake System . 234,320 Anti-Lock (ABS)
. 235,238 Fluid Check . 321,343 Hoses
. 320 10 364 INDEX Master Cylinder
. 321 Parking . 232 Warning Light
. 155,234 Brakes . 234,320 Brake/Transmission Interlock . 222 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . 67 Brightness, Interior Lights . 121 Bulb Replacement . 336,337 Bulbs, Light . 70,336 Calibration, Compass . 169 Capacities, Fluid . 341 Caps, Filler Fuel . 274
. 302 Oil (Engine) Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
. 316 Car Washes . 325 Carbon Monoxide Warning . 68,273 Cargo (Vehicle Loading)
. 276
. 305 Catalytic Converter CD (Compact Disc) Player
. 191 Cellular Phone . 78,191,192 Center High Mounted Stop Light
. 340 Certification Label
. 276 Chains, Tire . 261 Chart, Tire Sizing . 247 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)
. 298 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . 68 Checks, Safety . 68 Child Restraint
. 58,59,60,62,64 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . 61,62 Clean Air Gasoline . 270 Cleaning Wheels
. 326 Windshield Wiper Blades . 312 Climate Control
. 203 Clock . 178,193 INDEX 365 Cold Weather Operation . 217 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . 202 Compass . 169 Compass Calibration . 169 Compass Variance . 170 Computer, Trip/Travel
. 163 Console
. 143 Console, Floor . 143 Console, Overhead . 129 Contract, Service . 355 Converter, Catalytic . 305 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . 316 Cooling System . 314 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)
. 316 Coolant Capacity . 341
. 314,317 Coolant Level Disposal of Used Coolant
. 317 Drain, Flush, and Refill
. 315 Inspection . 317 Points to Remember
. 318 Pressure Cap . 316 Radiator Cap . 316 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
. 315,341,342 Corrosion Protection . 324 Cruise Control (Speed Control)
. 126 Cruise Light
. 150 Cup Holder . 142,328
. 353 Customer Assistance Data Recorder, Event
. 56 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . 121 Daytime Running Lights . 118 Dealer Service . 300 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . 36 Deck Lid, Power Release . 35 Defroster, Rear Window . 144 Defroster, Windshield . 70,205 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . 122 10 366 INDEX Diagnostic System, Onboard . 297 Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player . 191 Dimmer Switch, Headlight
. 120 Dipsticks Oil (Engine)
. 301 Disabled Vehicle Towing . 291 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . 317
. 303 Engine Oil Door Locks . 29 Door Locks, Automatic
. 31 Door Opener, Garage . 130 Drive Belts
. 303 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . 229 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . 230 Electric Remote Mirrors . 76 Electrical Power Outlets . 140 Electronic Brake Control System . 238
. 331 Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)
. 126
. 240 Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
. 151 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
. 159
. 36 Emergency Deck Lid Release Emergency, In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . 289 Hazard Warning Flasher
. 280 Jump Starting . 286 Overheating . 280 Towing . 291 Emergency Trunk Release . 36 Emission Control System Maintenance . 298,346 Engine
. 296
. 304
. 219 Air Cleaner Block Heater Break-In Recommendations . 67 Checking Oil Level
. 301 Compartment . 296 Coolant (Antifreeze)
. 314,342 Cooling . 314 Exhaust Gas Caution . 68,273 Fails to Start . 218 Flooded, Starting . 218 Fuel Requirements
. 270 Jump Starting . 286
. 301,341,342 Oil Oil Change Interval
. 301 Oil Filler Cap . 302 Oil Filter
. 303 Oil Filter Disposal . 303 Oil Selection . 302,341 Overheating . 280 Starting . 214 Temperature Gauge . 151 INDEX 367 Engine Oil Viscosity . 302 Enhanced Accident Response Feature
. 54 Entry System, Illuminated . 20 Ethanol
. 271 Event Data Recorder
. 56 Exhaust Gas Caution . 68,273,313 Exhaust System . 68,313 Exterior Folding Mirrors
. 76 Exterior Lighting . 116 Exterior Lights
. 70 Filler Location Fuel Filters
. 274 Air Cleaner
. 304 Air Conditioning . 208,310 Engine Fuel
. 304
. 303,342 Engine Oil
. 303 Engine Oil Disposal 10 368 INDEX Flashers Hazard Warning . 280 Turn Signal
. 70,119,152 Flash-To-Pass . 120 Flooded Engine Starting . 218 Fluid, Brake
. 343 Fluid Capacities . 341 Fluid Leaks . 70 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . 322 Brake . 321 Cooling System . 314 Engine Oil
. 301 Power Steering . 310 Fluids . 342 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . 342 Fog Lights . 118,154 Folding Rear Seat . 113 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
. 289 Front Suspension Ball Joints
. 311 Front Wheel Bearings . 324 Fuel
. 270 Adding . 274 Additives . 272 Clean Air . 270
. 271 Ethanol Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
. 274 Filter . 304 Gasoline
. 270 Gauge . 150 Hoses
. 319 Materials Added . 272 Methanol
. 271 Octane Rating . 270,342 Requirements . 270 Specifications . 342 Tank Capacity . 341 Fuel System Caution . 274 INDEX 369 Fueling . 274 Fuses
. 329 Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt)
. 130
. 274,297 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)
. 270 Gasoline, Clean Air Gasoline (Fuel)
. 270 Gasoline, Reformulated . 270 Gauges Coolant Temperature . 151 Fuel . 150 Speedometer
. 150
. 150 Tachometer General Information . 18,26,104,229,269 General Maintenance . 300 Glass Cleaning . 327 Gross Axle Weight Rating . 276 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . 276 GVWR . 276 Hands-Free Phone (UConnect)
. 78,191,192 Hard Drive (HDD) . 191 Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . 230 Hazard Warning Flasher . 280 Head Restraints . 111 Headlight Washers . 312
. 337 Headlights Automatic
. 117 Bulb Replacement . 337 Cleaning . 327 Delay . 117 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . 120
. 118 Lights On Reminder On With Wipers
. 117,124 Passing . 120 Switch . 116 Time Delay . 117 10 370 INDEX Washers . 312 Heated Mirrors . 77 Heated Seats . 112 Heater
. 203 Heater, Engine Block . 219 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . 120 Holder, Cup . 142 HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . 130 Hood Release
. 114 Hoses . 319 Instrument Cluster . 149,150 Instrument Panel and Controls
. 148 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . 328 Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
. 329 Interior Appearance Care . 326 Interior Lights . 121 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)
. 122 Introduction . 4 Jump Starting . 286 Ignition . 14 Key . 12,14 Ignition Key Removal
. 14 Illuminated Entry . 20 Immobilizer (Sentry Key)
. 15 Infant Restraint
. 58 Inflation Pressure Tires . 156 Information Center, Vehicle . 159 Key, Programming . 17 Key, Replacement
. 16 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . 15 Key-In Reminder . 15 Keyless Entry System . 21 Keyless Go . 12,216 Keys
. 12 Kicker Sound System . 200 Knee Bolster
. 46 Lane Change and Turn Signals
. 119 Lap/Shoulder Belts . 38 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
. 61,62 Latch Plate . 39 Latches . 70 Hood . 114 Lead Free Gasoline
. 270 Leaks, Fluid . 70 Life of Tires . 259 Light Bulbs . 70,336 Lights . 70,116 Airbag . 52,55,70,152 Anti-Lock . 158,236 Automatic Headlights . 117 Brake Assist Warning . 244 Brake Warning . 155,234 INDEX 371 Bulb Replacement
. 336,337 Center Mounted Stop . 340 Courtesy/Reading . 120,129 Cruise . 150 Daytime Running . 118 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . 119,120 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
. 244 Electronic Throttle Control Warning . 151 Engine Temperature Warning . 152 Exterior . 70 Fog . 118,154 Hazard Warning Flasher
. 280 Headlight Switch . 116 Headlights
. 116,337 Headlights On Reminder . 118 Headlights On With Wipers . 117,124 High Beam . 120,153 High Beam Indicator . 153 High Beam/Low Beam Select
. 120 10 372 INDEX Illuminated Entry . 20 Instrument Cluster
. 116,150 Intensity Control . 121 Interior
. 121,129
. 340 License Lights On Reminder
. 118 Low Fuel
. 158 Low Tire . 156 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . 158 Map Reading . 120,129 Oil Pressure . 153 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . 121 Passing . 120 Reading . 120,129 Seat Belt Reminder
. 154 Service . 336,337 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator)
. 158
. 156,264 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) Capacities Tires
. 244 Traction Control Turn Signal
. 70,119,152 Vanity Mirror . 77 Voltage
. 150
. 150 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) Loading Vehicle . 276,277
. 277
. 250 Locks . 29 Auto Unlock . 31 Automatic Door . 31 Door . 29 Power Door . 30 Low Tire Pressure System . 264 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) Lubrication, Body Lumbar Support
. 61,62
. 311
. 111 Maintenance Free Battery . 307 Maintenance, General
. 300 Maintenance Procedures . 300 Maintenance Schedule . 346 Maintenance, Sunroof . 139 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
. 158,298 Manual, Service . 357 Map/Reading Lights
. 120,129 Master Cylinder (Brakes)
. 321 Methanol
. 271 Mini-Trip Computer . 163 Mirrors . 75 Automatic Dimming . 75 Electric Powered . 76 Electric Remote
. 76 Exterior Folding . 76 Heated . 77 Outside . 75 Vanity . 77 INDEX 373 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle
. 7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . 264 Mopar Parts . 299,356 MP3 Player . 191 MTBE/ETBE . 271 Multi-Function Control Lever
. 119 Navigation Radio . 191 Navigation System . 191 New Vehicle Break-In Period . 67 Occupant Restraints . 37 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . 270,342 Odometer
. 150 Trip . 150 Oil Change Indicator
. 162 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . 162
. 301,342 Oil, Engine Capacity . 341 10 374 INDEX Change Interval
. 301 Checking . 301 Dipstick . 301 Disposal
. 303
. 303,342 Filter Filter Disposal
. 303 Materials Added to . 303 Recommendation . 302,341 Viscosity . 302,341 Oil Filter, Change . 303 Oil Filter, Selection . 303 Onboard Diagnostic System . 297,298 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt)
. 130
. 297 Operating Precautions Outside Rearview Mirrors
. 75 Overhead Console . 129 Overheating, Engine . 280
. 357 Owners Manual (Operator Manual) Paint Care . 324 Panic Alarm . 25 Parking Brake . 232 Parking On Hill
. 233 Passing Light . 120 Personal Settings . 172 Pets . 67 Phone, Cellular
. 78,191,192 Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect) . 78,191,192 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . 250 Port Universal Serial Bus (USB) . 191 USB . 191 Power Brakes . 234 Deck Lid Release . 35 Distribution Center (Fuses)
. 331
. 30 Door Locks INDEX 375 Mirrors . 76 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)
. 140 Seats . 109 Steering . 237 Steering, Checking . 310 Sunroof
. 136 Windows . 33 Power Steering Fluid . 310,343 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts
. 45 Pretensioners Seat Belts . 43 Programmable Electronic Features . 172 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . 21 Radial Ply Tires . 257 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . 316 Radio Broadcast Signals
. 175 Radio, Navigation . 191 Radio Operation . 192,202 Radio Remote Controls . 201 Radio, Satellite . 191,192,195 Radio (Sound Systems) . 191 Rear Cup Holder . 142 Rear Seat, Folding . 113
. 324 Rear Wheel Bearings Rear Window Defroster
. 144 Rear Window Features . 144 Reception, Radio . 175 Recorder, Event Data . 56 Recreational Towing . 278 Reformulated Gasoline . 270 Refrigerant
. 310 Release, Hood . 114 Reminder, Lights On . 118 Reminder, Seat Belt
. 43 Remote Control Starting System . 27 10 376 INDEX Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . 21 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . 201 Remote Starting System . 27 Remote Trunk Release . 35 Replacement Bulbs . 336 Replacement Keys . 16 Replacement Parts . 299 Replacement Tires
. 260 Reporting Safety Defects . 356 Restraint, Head . 111 Restraints, Child . 58 Restraints, Occupant
. 37 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . 289 Rotation, Tires . 262 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . 69 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle
. 70 Safety Defects, Reporting . 356 Safety, Exhaust Gas . 68
. 245 Safety Information, Tire Safety Tips
. 68 Satellite Radio . 191,192,195 Satellite Radio Antenna
. 196 Schedule, Maintenance . 346
. 328 Seat Belt Maintenance Seat Belt Reminder
. 43
. 37,38,69 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . 45 Child Restraint . 58,60,64
. 45 Extender Front Seat
. 38,39 Inspection . 69 Operating Instructions
. 39 Pretensioners . 43 Rear Seat . 38 Reminder . 154 Untwisting Procedure . 42 INDEX 377 Seats . 109
. 109 Adjustment Head Restraints
. 111 Heated . 112
. 109 Height Adjustment Lumbar Support
. 111 Power
. 109 Rear Folding . 113 Seatback Release . 113 Tilting . 109
. 18,156 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm)
. 315,342 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
. 302 Selection of Oil Sentry Key (Immobilizer)
. 15 Sentry Key Programming . 17 Sentry Key Replacement
. 16 Service Assistance
. 353 Service Contract . 355 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction
. 158 Indicator) Service Manuals
. 357 Setting the Clock . 178,193 Settings, Personal . 172 Shifting . 220 Automatic Transmission . 220,223 Shoulder Belts . 38 Side Airbag . 47,53
. 47 Side Curtain (Window Airbag) Side Window Demisters (Defrosters)
. 207 Signals, Turn . 70,119,152 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . 229 Snow Chains (Tire Chains)
. 261 Snow Tires
. 262 Sound System Kicker
. 200 Sound Systems (Radio) . 191 10 378 INDEX Spark Plugs . 304,342 Specifications Fuel (Gasoline) Oil
. 342
. 342
. 126 Speed Control (Cruise Control) Speedometer
. 150 Starting . 27,214 Automatic Transmission . 215 Cold Weather . 217 Emergency (Jump Starting)
. 286 Engine Fails to Start
. 218 Remote . 27 Starting and Operating . 214 Starting Procedures
. 214 Steering Column Controls
. 119 Column Lock . 125 Linkage . 311 Power
. 237,310 Tilt Column . 125 Wheel, Tilt
. 125 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
. 201 Controls Storage . 335 Storage, Vehicle . 207,335 Storing Your Vehicle . 335 Stuck, Freeing . 289 Sun Roof . 136 Sunglasses Storage . 130 Sunroof Maintenance . 139 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . 46 System, Navigation . 191 System, Remote Starting . 27 Tachometer
. 150 Telescoping Steering Column . 125
. 151,281 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant Tether Anchor, Child Restraint
. 61 INDEX 379
. 18 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) Theft System (Security Alarm)
. 18 Tilt Steering Column . 125 Time Delay, Headlight
. 117 Tire and Loading Information Placard . 250 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . 249 Tire Markings
. 245 Tire Safety Information . 245 TIREFIT . 281 Tires . 70,254,358 Aging (Life of Tires)
. 259 Air Pressure . 254 Alignment
. 261 Chains . 261 General Information . 254 High Speed . 257 Inflation Pressures
. 255 Life of Tires . 259 Load Capacity . 250,251 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
. 264 Quality Grading . 358
. 257 Radial Replacement
. 260 Rotation . 262 Safety
. 245,254 Sizes . 247 Snow Tires . 262 Spinning . 258 Tread Wear Indicators . 258 To Open Hood . 114 Towing . 278 24-Hour Towing Assistance . 91 Behind a Motor Home
. 278 Disabled Vehicle . 291 Recreational
. 278 Towing Assistance . 91 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . 278 Traction Control . 239 10 380 INDEX Trailer Towing . 278 Transmission . 322 Automatic . 220,223,322 Fluid . 343 Shifting . 220 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . 25 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt)
. 130 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry)
. 21 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . 21
. 67 Transporting Pets Tread Wear Indicators
. 258 Trip Odometer . 150 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid)
. 35,36 Trunk Release, Emergency . 36 Trunk Release Remote Control
. 35 Turn Signals . 119,152 UConnect (Hands-Free Phone)
. 78,191 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . 358 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port . 191 Universal Transmitter . 130 Unleaded Gasoline . 270 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt
. 42 USB Port . 191 Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
. 319 Vanity Mirrors . 77 Variance, Compass . 170 Vehicle Certification Label
. 276 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . 6 Vehicle Loading . 251,276,277 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . 7 Vehicle Storage . 207,335 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm)
. 18 INDEX 381 Viscosity, Engine Oil . 302 Voice Recognition System (VR)
. 104 Warning Flasher, Hazard . 280 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description)
. 150 Warnings and Cautions . 6 Warranty Information . 356 Washer, Adding Fluid . 124,312 Washers, Windshield . 122,123,312 Washing Vehicle . 325 Water Driving Through . 230 Wheel Alignment and Balance . 261 Wheel and Wheel Trim . 326 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . 326 Wheel Bearings
. 324 Wind Buffeting . 34,139 Window Airbag (Side Curtain)
. 47,53 Window Fogging . 207 Windows
. 33 Power . 33
. 70,205
. 122,123,312 Fluid . 312 Windshield Wiper Blades
. 312 Windshield Wipers . 122 Wiper Blade Replacement
. 312 Wiper, Delay . 122 Wipers, Intermittent
. 122 Windshield Defroster Windshield Washers 10 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicles electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the vehicles electronic systems. 2 0 0 8 C h a r g e r S R T 8 81-226-0821 First Edition Printed in U.S.A. 2 0 0 8 O W N E R S M A N U A L Charger SRT8
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC